Attachment #199555 for bug #228205

View | Details | Raw Unified | Return to bug 228205 | Differences between
Collapse All | Expand All




% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
%
\def\texinfoversion{2009-05-16.16}
%
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
% 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
%
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
%
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty

% General Public License for more details.
%
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
% along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
%
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
%
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
%     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
%
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
%
% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
%
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a

% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
% full Texinfo distribution.
%
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.


\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}


\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}


\chardef\other=12

% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.

\let\ptexend=\end
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
\let\ptexexclam=\!
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
\let\ptexgtr=>
\let\ptexhat=^
\let\ptexi=\i
\let\ptexindent=\indent
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
\let\ptexless=<
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
\let\ptexplus=+
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
\let\ptexslash=\/
\let\ptexstar=\*
\let\ptext=\t
\let\ptextop=\top
{\catcode`\'=\active
\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright

% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
% starts a new line in the output.
\newlinechar = `^^J

% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
%
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
\else
  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
\fi

% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi

\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi

% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
\chardef\spacecat = 10
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}

% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
\chardef\dashChar  = `\-
\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
\chardef\equalChar = `\=
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
\chardef\questChar = `\?
\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
\chardef\underChar = `\_

% Ignore a token.
%
\def\gobble#1{}

% The following is used inside several \edef's.
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
\def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
\def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%

% Hyphenation fixes.
\hyphenation{
  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
  spell-ing spell-ings
  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
  wide-spread wrap-around
}

% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
\newdimen\bindingoffset
\newdimen\normaloffset
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight

% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
%
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}

% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
%
\def\|{%
  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
  \leavevmode
  %
  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
  \vadjust{%
    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
    \vskip-\baselineskip
    %
    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
    \llap{%
      %
      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
      %
      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
      \hskip 12pt
    }%
  }%
}

% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make

    \tracingassigns1
  \fi
  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
  \errorcontextlines16
}%

% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing

\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in

% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
%
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
%
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.  The solution is
% described on page 260 of The TeXbook.  It involves outputting two
% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
% one after.  I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
\def\domark{%
  \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
  \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
  \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
  \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
  \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
  \mark{%
                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2
      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
    \noexpand\else \the\toks8
  }%
}
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
% first @chapter.
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
  \ifcase0\topmark\fi
  \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
}
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}

% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
\def\lastchapterdefs{}
\def\lastsectiondefs{}
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
\def\lastcolordefs{}

% Main output routine.
\chardef\PAGE = 255
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}

  %
  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
  \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
  \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
  %
  {%

    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
    % before the \shipout runs.
    %
    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
               % it needs to be
               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
    \shipout\vbox{%
      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
      %
      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
        \hsize = \outerhsize

      \pagebody{#1}%
      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
        \vskip 24pt
        \unvbox\footlinebox
      \fi
      %

      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
      \fi
    }% end of \shipout\vbox
  }% end of group with \indexdummies
  \advancepageno
  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
}

% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
}

% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
%
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
  \def\argtorun{#2}%
  \begingroup
    \obeylines
    \spaceisspace
    #1%
    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
\def\parseargx{%
  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
  \else
    \expandafter\parseargline
  \fi
}

% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
{\obeyspaces %
 \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}

{\obeylines %
  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
    %
    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
  }%
}

% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}

% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
%
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
%    @end itemize  @c foo
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
% by \finishparsearg.
% result to \toks0.
%
% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
%
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
  \def\temp{#3}%
  \ifx\temp\empty
    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
    \let\temp\finishparsearg
  \else
    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
  \fi
  % Put the space token in:
  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
}

% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
%
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
%
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
\endgroup

% \parseargdef\foo{...}
%	is roughly equivalent to
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
%
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03

\def\parseargdef#1{%
  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
}
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
  \def#1##1%
}

% Several utility definitions with active space:
{
  \obeyspaces
  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage

  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
  % should produce a line of output anyway.
  %
  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}

  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
}

\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}

\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
\csname #1\endcsname\fi}

% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
%
%   \envdef\foo{...}
%   \def\Efoo{...}
%
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
%
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
% special case.)


% At run-time, environments start with this:
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
% initialize
\let\thisenv\empty

% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}

% Check whether we're in the right environment:
\def\checkenv#1{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
  \else
    \badenverr
    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
  \fi
}

% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
\def\badenverr{%
\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
  \errhelp = \EMsimple
  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
}
\def\inenvironment#1{%
  \ifx#1\empty
    out of any environment%
  \else
    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
  \fi
}

% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
%
\parseargdef\end{%
  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
  \else
    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
    \csname E#1\endcsname
    \endgroup
  \fi
}

\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}


%% Simple single-character @ commands


\let\}=\myrbrace
\begingroup
  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other

  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
!endgroup

% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
\let\comma = ,

% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
\let\, = \c

\let\ubaraccent = \b
\let\udotaccent = \d

% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
\def\questiondown{?`}
\def\exclamdown{!`}
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}

% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
\def\imacro{i}
\def\jmacro{j}
\def\dotless#1{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
  \fi\fi
}

% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
%
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }

% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
% \scriptscriptstyle).
%
\def\LaTeX{%
  L\kern-.36em
  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
  \kern-.15em
  \TeX
}

% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and

\let\/=\allowbreak

% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}

% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}

% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}

% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
%
\def\onword{on}
\def\offword{off}
%
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
  \else
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
  \fi\fi
}

% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would

\newbox\groupbox
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
%
\envdef\group{%
  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
  \fi
  \startsavinginserts
  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
  % above.  But it's pretty close.
  \def\Egroup{%
    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
    % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
    \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
    % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
    \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
    % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
    % group, force a page break.
    \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
      \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
        \page
      \fi
    \fi
    \copy\groupbox
    \endgroup         % End the \group.
  }%
  %
  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
    \everypar = {\strut}%
    %
    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
    % normal interline spacing.
    \offinterlineskip
    %
    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
    % empty paragraph.
    \ifx\par\lisppar
      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
      %
      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
      \obeylines
    \fi
    %
    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after

    \comment
}
%
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
% above.  But it's pretty close.
\def\Egroup{%
    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
  % group, force a page break.
  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
      \page
    \fi
  \fi
  \box\groupbox
  \prevdepth = \dimen1
  \checkinserts
}
%
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
%


\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in

\def\need{\parsearg\needx}

% Old definition--didn't work.
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
%{\baselineskip=0pt%

%\prevdepth=-1000pt
%}}

\parseargdef\need{%
  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
  % paragraph.
  \par

  \fi
}

% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).

\let\br = \par

% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
% font as three actual period characters.
%
\def\dots{%
  \leavevmode
  \hbox to 1.5em{%
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
    .\hss.\hss.%
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
  }%
}

% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
%
\def\enddots{%
  \leavevmode
  \hbox to 2em{%
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
  }%
  \spacefactor=3000
}

% @page forces the start of a new page.
%
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}

\newskip\exdentamount

% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}

% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}

% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion

  \temp
}

% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
%
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
\def\includezzz#1{%
  \pushthisfilestack
  \def\thisfile{#1}%
  {%
    \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
    \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
    \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
    \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
    %
    % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
    % definitions, etc.
    \expandafter
  }\temp
  \popthisfilestack
}
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
  \catcode`\\=\other
  \catcode`~=\other
  \catcode`^=\other

  \catcode`<=\other
  \catcode`>=\other
  \catcode`+=\other
  \catcode`-=\other
  \catcode`\`=\other
  \catcode`\'=\other
}

\def\pushthisfilestack{%
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
}
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
}
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
}

\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
  the stack of filenames is empty.}}

\def\thisfile{}

% @center line
% outputs that line, centered.
%
\parseargdef\center{%
  \ifhmode
    \let\next\centerH
  \else
    \let\next\centerV
  \fi
  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
}
\def\centerH#1{%
  {%
    \hfil\break
    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
    \line{#1}%
    \break
  }%
}
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}

% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space

\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}

% @comment ...line which is ignored...
% @c is the same as @comment

\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
\def\noneword{none}
%
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\asisword
  \else

% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
\def\doexampleindent#1{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\asisword
  \else

% By default, we suppress indentation.
%
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
\newdimen\currentparindent
%
\def\insertword{insert}
%
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
\def\dofirstparagraphindent#1{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\noneword
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent

\def\asis#1{#1}

% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
%
\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
%
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
% which is what @var uses.
{
  \catcode`\_ = \active
  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
    \catcode`\_=\active
    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
  }
}
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not

%
\def\math{%
  \tex
  \mathunderscore
  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
  \mathactive
  % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
  \let\"=\ddot
  \let\'=\acute
  \let\==\bar
  \let\^=\hat
  \let\`=\grave
  \let\u=\breve
  \let\v=\check
  \let\~=\tilde
  \let\dotaccent=\dot
  $\finishmath
}
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.

% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
%
{
  \catcode`^ = \active
  \catcode`< = \active
  \catcode`> = \active
  \catcode`+ = \active
  \catcode`' = \active
  \gdef\mathactive{%
    \let^ = \ptexhat
    \let< = \ptexless
    \let> = \ptexgtr
    \let+ = \ptexplus
    \let' = \ptexquoteright
  }
}

% Some math mode symbols.
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}

% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
% whichever is larger.
%
\def\dots{%
  \leavevmode
  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
    \dimen0 = \wd0
  \else
    \dimen0 = 1.5em
  \fi
  \hbox to \dimen0{%
    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
  }%
}

% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
%
\def\enddots{%
  \dots
  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
}

% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
% Texinfo's parsing.
%
\let\comma = ,

% @refill is a no-op.
\let\refill=\relax

% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
\def\setfilename{%
   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
   \iflinks
     \tryauxfile
     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
   \openindices
   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
   %
   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
   \closein 1
   \temp
   %
   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
}

\newif\ifpdf
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest

% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
  \pdffalse
  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
  \let\endlink = \relax
  \let\linkcolor = \relax
  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
\else
  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
  \else
    \ifcase\pdfoutput
    \else
      \pdftrue
    \fi
  \fi
\fi

% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
% that's what we do).

% double active backslashes.
%
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
   @catcode`@\=@active
   @let\=@doublebackslash}
}

% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
% changes for Texinfo.  It is included here under the GPL by permission
% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
%
% #1 is the tokens to replace.
% #2 is the replacement.
% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
%
\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
    ##1%
    \ifx\\##2\\%
    \else
      #2%
      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
      }%
    \fi
  }%
  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
}
\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}

% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
\def\backslashparens#1{%
  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
}

\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
output) for that.)}

\ifpdf
  %
  % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex.
  \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35}
  \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1}
  %
  % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
  % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
  \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k  #1 K}}
  %
  % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
  % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
  \def\setcolor#1{%
    \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
    \domark
    \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
  }
  %
  \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack}
  \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
  \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
  \def\lastcolordefs{}
  %
  \def\makefootline{%
    \baselineskip24pt
    \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
  }
  %
  \def\makeheadline{%
    \vbox to 0pt{%
      \vskip-22.5pt
      \line{%
        \vbox to8.5pt{}%
        % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
        \getcolormarks
        % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
        \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
      }%
      \vss
    }%
    \nointerlineskip
  }
  %
  %
  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
  %
  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
    \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
    \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
    %
    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
    % others).  Let's try in that order.
    \let\pdfimgext=\empty
    \begingroup
      \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
        \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
          \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
            \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
              \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
                \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
                  \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
                \fi
              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
              \fi
            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
            \fi
          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
          \fi
        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
        \fi
      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
      \fi
      \closein 1
    \endgroup
    %
    % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
      \immediate\pdfimage
    \else
      \immediate\pdfximage
    \fi
      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
         #1.\pdfimgext
       \else
         {#1.\pdfimgext}%
       \fi
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
    \fi}
  %
  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
    \indexnofonts
    \turnoffactive
    \activebackslashdouble
    \makevalueexpandable
    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
  }}
  %
  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
  %
  % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
  \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
  \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
  %
  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
  % come from Petr Olsak
  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%

    \advance\tempnum by 1
    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
  %
  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
  % #4 is the page number
  %
  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
    \else
      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
    \fi
    %
    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
    %
    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
  }
  %
  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
    \begingroup
    \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
      \closein 1
      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
      %
      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
	\def\thissecnum{0}%
	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
      }%
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
      }%
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
      }%
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
      }%
      \def\thischapnum{0}%
      \def\thissecnum{0}%
      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
      %
      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
      % al. a second time, below.

      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
      \readdatafile{toc}%
      %
      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
      %
      % We use the node names as the destinations.
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%

      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
      %
      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
      %
      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
      \indexnofonts
      \setupdatafile
      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
      \input \tocreadfilename
    \endgroup
  }
  %
  \def\makelinks #1,{%
    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
    \ifx\params\E
      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
    \else
      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
      \picknum{#1}%
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
      \linkcolor #1%
      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
      \endlink
    \fi
    \nextmakelinks
  }
  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
  \def\pn#1{%
    \def\p{#1}%
    \ifx\p\lbrace
      \let\nextpn=\ppn
    \else
      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
      \def\first{#1}
    \fi
    \nextpn
  }
  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces

  \else
    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
  \fi
  % make a live url in pdf output.
  \def\pdfurl#1{%
    \begingroup
      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
      % people have actually reported a problem with.
      %
      \normalturnoffactive
      \def\@{@}%
      \let\/=\empty
      \makevalueexpandable
      % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
      % special-casing \var here?
      \def\var##1{##1}%
      %
      \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
        % #1
    \endgroup}
  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
  \def\maketoks{%
    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
    \ifx\first0\adn0
    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6

    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
  \def\pdflink#1{%
    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
    \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
\else
  % non-pdf mode
  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
  \let\endlink = \relax
  \let\setcolor = \gobble
  \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput


\message{fonts,}
% Font-change commands.

% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
% italics, not bold italics.
%
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
}

% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
%
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}

\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}

% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
% in those cases "rm" is bold.  Sigh.
\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}

% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
% So we set up a \sf.
\newfam\sffam
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.

% We don't need math for this font style.
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}

% We don't need math for this one.
\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}

% Default leading.
\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt

\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
%
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
\def\baselinefactor{1}
%
\def\setleading#1{%
  \dimen0 = #1\relax
  \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
  \normalbaselines
  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%

  }%
}

% PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
%
% do nothing with this by default.
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble

% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
  \begingroup
    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
%%Version: 1.000
%%EndComments
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
12 dict begin
begincmap
/CIDSystemInfo
<< /Registry (TeX)
/Ordering (OT1)
/Supplement 0
>> def
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
/CMapType 2 def
1 begincodespacerange
<00> <7F>
endcodespacerange
8 beginbfrange
<00> <01> <0393>
<09> <0A> <03A8>
<23> <26> <0023>
<28> <3B> <0028>
<3F> <5B> <003F>
<5D> <5E> <005D>
<61> <7A> <0061>
<7B> <7C> <2013>
endbfrange
40 beginbfchar
<02> <0398>
<03> <039B>
<04> <039E>
<05> <03A0>
<06> <03A3>
<07> <03D2>
<08> <03A6>
<0B> <00660066>
<0C> <00660069>
<0D> <0066006C>
<0E> <006600660069>
<0F> <00660066006C>
<10> <0131>
<11> <0237>
<12> <0060>
<13> <00B4>
<14> <02C7>
<15> <02D8>
<16> <00AF>
<17> <02DA>
<18> <00B8>
<19> <00DF>
<1A> <00E6>
<1B> <0153>
<1C> <00F8>
<1D> <00C6>
<1E> <0152>
<1F> <00D8>
<21> <0021>
<22> <201D>
<27> <2019>
<3C> <00A1>
<3D> <003D>
<3E> <00BF>
<5C> <201C>
<5F> <02D9>
<60> <2018>
<7D> <02DD>
<7E> <007E>
<7F> <00A8>
endbfchar
endcmap
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
end
end
%%EndResource
%%EOF
    }\endgroup
  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
  }%
%
% \cmapOT1IT
  \begingroup
    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
%%Version: 1.000
%%EndComments
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
12 dict begin
begincmap
/CIDSystemInfo
<< /Registry (TeX)
/Ordering (OT1IT)
/Supplement 0
>> def
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
/CMapType 2 def
1 begincodespacerange
<00> <7F>
endcodespacerange
8 beginbfrange
<00> <01> <0393>
<09> <0A> <03A8>
<25> <26> <0025>
<28> <3B> <0028>
<3F> <5B> <003F>
<5D> <5E> <005D>
<61> <7A> <0061>
<7B> <7C> <2013>
endbfrange
42 beginbfchar
<02> <0398>
<03> <039B>
<04> <039E>
<05> <03A0>
<06> <03A3>
<07> <03D2>
<08> <03A6>
<0B> <00660066>
<0C> <00660069>
<0D> <0066006C>
<0E> <006600660069>
<0F> <00660066006C>
<10> <0131>
<11> <0237>
<12> <0060>
<13> <00B4>
<14> <02C7>
<15> <02D8>
<16> <00AF>
<17> <02DA>
<18> <00B8>
<19> <00DF>
<1A> <00E6>
<1B> <0153>
<1C> <00F8>
<1D> <00C6>
<1E> <0152>
<1F> <00D8>
<21> <0021>
<22> <201D>
<23> <0023>
<24> <00A3>
<27> <2019>
<3C> <00A1>
<3D> <003D>
<3E> <00BF>
<5C> <201C>
<5F> <02D9>
<60> <2018>
<7D> <02DD>
<7E> <007E>
<7F> <00A8>
endbfchar
endcmap
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
end
end
%%EndResource
%%EOF
    }\endgroup
  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
  }%
%
% \cmapOT1TT
  \begingroup
    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
%%Version: 1.000
%%EndComments
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
12 dict begin
begincmap
/CIDSystemInfo
<< /Registry (TeX)
/Ordering (OT1TT)
/Supplement 0
>> def
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
/CMapType 2 def
1 begincodespacerange
<00> <7F>
endcodespacerange
5 beginbfrange
<00> <01> <0393>
<09> <0A> <03A8>
<21> <26> <0021>
<28> <5F> <0028>
<61> <7E> <0061>
endbfrange
32 beginbfchar
<02> <0398>
<03> <039B>
<04> <039E>
<05> <03A0>
<06> <03A3>
<07> <03D2>
<08> <03A6>
<0B> <2191>
<0C> <2193>
<0D> <0027>
<0E> <00A1>
<0F> <00BF>
<10> <0131>
<11> <0237>
<12> <0060>
<13> <00B4>
<14> <02C7>
<15> <02D8>
<16> <00AF>
<17> <02DA>
<18> <00B8>
<19> <00DF>
<1A> <00E6>
<1B> <0153>
<1C> <00F8>
<1D> <00C6>
<1E> <0152>
<1F> <00D8>
<20> <2423>
<27> <2019>
<60> <2018>
<7F> <00A8>
endbfchar
endcmap
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
end
end
%%EndResource
%%EOF
    }\endgroup
  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
  }%
\fi\fi


% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
% empty to omit).
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
  \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
  \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
}
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
\let\cmap\gobble
% emacs-page end of cmaps

% Use cm as the default font prefix.
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix

\def\scshape{csc}
\def\scbshape{csc}

% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  This is the default in
% Texinfo.
%
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
\def\textecsize{1095}

% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}

% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
\font\smalli=cmmi9
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
\def\smallecsize{0900}

% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
\def\smallerecsize{0800}

% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
\def\titleecsize{2074}
\def\authortt{\sectt}

% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
\def\chapecsize{1728}

% Section fonts (14.4pt).
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\secbf\secrm
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
\def\sececsize{1440}

% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
\def\ssececsize{1200}

% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
\def\reducedecsize{1000}

% reset the current fonts
\textfonts
\rm
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions


% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
% future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
%
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
% Text fonts (10pt).
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
\def\textecsize{1000}

% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}

% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
\font\smalli=cmmi9
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
\def\smallecsize{0900}

% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
\def\smallerecsize{0800}

% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
\def\titleecsize{2074}

% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\chapbf\chaprm
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
\def\chapecsize{1440}

% Section fonts (12pt).
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\let\secbf\secrm
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\font\seci=cmmi12
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
\def\sececsize{1200}

% Subsection fonts (10pt).
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\font\sseci=cmmi10
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
\def\ssececsize{1000}

% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
\def\reducedecsize{0900}

% reduce space between paragraphs
\divide\parskip by 2

% reset the current fonts
\textfonts
\rm
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions


% We provide the user-level command
%   @fonttextsize 10
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
%
\def\xword{10}
\def\xiword{11}
%
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
  \def\textsizearg{#1}%
  \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
  %
  % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
  % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
  %
 \begingroup \globaldefs=1
  \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
  \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
  \else
    \errhelp=\EMsimple
    \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
  \fi\fi
 \endgroup
}


% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since

}

% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
%
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
%
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
%
\def\textfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
  \def\curfontsize{text}%
  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
\def\titlefonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
  \def\curfontsize{title}%
  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
\def\chapfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
\def\secfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
\def\subsecfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
\def\reducedfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
  \def\curfontsize{small}%
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallerfonts{%
  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}

% Fonts for short table of contents.
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}

% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}

% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts

% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
% can fit this many characters:
%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
%
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
%
% I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
%
% --karl, 24jan03.


% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
%
\definetextfontsizexi


\message{markup,}

% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
%
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }

% Markup style infrastructure.  \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
% currently in effect.
\newif\ifmarkupvar
\newif\ifmarkupsamp
\newif\ifmarkupkey
%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
\newif\ifmarkupcode
\newif\ifmarkupkbd
%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
\newif\ifmarkupexample
\newif\ifmarkupverb
\newif\ifmarkupverbatim

\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty

\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
  \csname markup#1true\endcsname
  \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
  \markupstylesetup
}

\let\markupstylesetup\empty

\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
    \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
  \def#1%
}

% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
}

\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
}

{
\catcode`\'=\active
\catcode`\`=\active

\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}

\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}

\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
}

\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright

\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft

% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
% from cmtt (char 0x0d).  The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
% evince), the lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the
% regular 0x27.
%
\def\codequoteright{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
      '%
    \else \char'15 \fi
  \else \char'15 \fi
}
%
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
% the code environments to do likewise.
%
\def\codequoteleft{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
      % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
      % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
      \relax`%
    \else \char'22 \fi
  \else \char'22 \fi
}

% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}

% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0

% Fonts for short table of contents.
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}

%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic


\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}

% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}

% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}

\let\i=\smartitalic
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
\let\emph=\smartitalic
\let\cite=\smartslanted

% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font

% @b, explicit bold.  Also @strong.
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
\let\strong=\b

% @sansserif, explicit sans.
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}

% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.

% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
%
\catcode`@=11
  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
  }
  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
  }
\catcode`@=\other
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default

% @t, explicit typewriter.
\def\t#1{%
  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
  \null
}

% @samp.
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}

% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}

% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
%
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
  \nohyphenation
  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
  #1}\null}

% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}

% @file, @option are the same as @samp.

    \nohyphenation
    %
    \rawbackslash
    \plainfrenchspacing
    #1%
  }%
  \null
}

% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.


% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
%  -- rms.
{
  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
  \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
  \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq  % default definitions
  %
  \global\def\code{\begingroup
    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
    % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
    \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
    \ifallowcodebreaks
     \let-\codedash
     \let_\codeunder
    \else
     \let-\realdash
     \let_\realunder
    \fi
    \codex
  }
  %
  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
  % just treat them as a normal -.
  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
}

\def\realdash{-}

}
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}

% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
%
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue

\def\keywordtrue{true}
\def\keywordfalse{false}

\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
  \def\txiarg{#1}%
  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
    \allowcodebreakstrue
  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
    \allowcodebreaksfalse
  \else
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
  \fi\fi
}

% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
% then @kbd has no effect.
\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}

% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
  \def\txiarg{#1}%
  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
  \else
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
  \fi\fi\fi
}
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
\def\wordexample{example}
\def\wordcode{code}

% Default is `distinct'.
\kbdinputstyle distinct

\def\xkey{\key}
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}

% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
\let\indicateurl=\code
\let\env=\code
\let\command=\code

% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}

% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
\def\click{\arrow}

% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url

  \endlink
\endgroup}

% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
%
\let\url=\uref

% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
%

  \let\email=\uref
\fi

% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
%
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }

% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
%
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}

\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}

% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}

% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
% all-uppercase.
%
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
  \def\temp{#2}%
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
  \fi
}

% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
%
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
  \def\temp{#2}%
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
  \fi
}


\message{glyphs,}

% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
%
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
%
\def\point{$\star$}
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}

% The @error{} command.
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
%
\newbox\errorbox
%
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
%
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
   \vbox{%
      \hrule height\dimen2
      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
      \hrule height\dimen2}
    \hfil}
%
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}

% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
%
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}

% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
%
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
% font height.
%
% feymr - regular
% feymo - slanted
% feybr - bold
% feybo - bold slanted
%
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
% Hmm.
%
% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
% Hope not.
%
%
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
\def\eurofont{%
  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
  % font installed.
  %
  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
  % that to the current nominal size.
  %
  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
  %
  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
  %
  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
    % bold:
    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
  \else
    % regular:
    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
  \fi
  \thiseurofont
}

% Glyphs from the EC fonts.  We don't use \let for the aliases, because
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
% the redefinition.
%
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
%
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
%
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases.  We put the
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
%
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
% the same EC font.
\def\ogonek#1{{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
  \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
  \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
  \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
  \else
    \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
    \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
    \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
    \fi
  \fi\fi\fi\fi
  }%
}
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
%
% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
\def\ecfont{%
  % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
  % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
  % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
  % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
  \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
  \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
    % bold:
    \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
  \else
    % regular:
    \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
  \fi
  \thisecfont
}

% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
%
\def\registeredsymbol{%
  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
    }$%
}

% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
%
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}

% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
% so we'll define it if necessary.
%
\ifx\Orb\undefined
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
\fi

% Quotes.
\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
\chardef\quoteright=`\'


\message{page headings,}


\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue

\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}

\envdef\titlepage{%
  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
  \begingroup
    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
    \finishedtitlepagetrue
    %
    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
    \let\oldpage = \page
    \def\page{%
                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
   \finishedtitlepagetrue
   %
   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
   %
   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
   %
   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
   \let\oldpage = \page
   \def\page{%
      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
	 \finishtitlepage
      \fi
      \oldpage
      \let\page = \oldpage
      \page
      \null
    }%
}

\def\Etitlepage{%
    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
	\finishtitlepage
    \fi
    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
    \oldpage
  \endgroup
  %
  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
  \HEADINGSon
  %
  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
    \shortcontents
    \contents
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
    \global\let\contents = \relax
  \fi
  %
  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
    \contents
    \global\let\contents = \relax
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
  \fi
}

\def\finishtitlepage{%
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
  \finishedtitlepagetrue
}

%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:

\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}

\parseargdef\title{%
  \checkenv\titlepage
  \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
  \finishedtitlepagefalse
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
}

\parseargdef\subtitle{%
  \checkenv\titlepage
  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
}

% @author should come last, but may come many times.
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
%
\parseargdef\author{%
  \def\temp{\quotation}%
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
  \else
    \checkenv\titlepage
    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
    {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
  \fi
}


%%% Set up page headings and footings.

\let\thispage=\folio

\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages

% Now make TeX use those variables
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline

% @evenfooting @thisfile||
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile

\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}

\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}

\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}

\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}

\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%

\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}

\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
  %
  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
  \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
  \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
}

\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}

% @evenheadingmarks top     \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
% @evenheadingmarks bottom  \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
%
% The same set of arguments for:
%
% @oddheadingmarks
% @evenfootingmarks
% @oddfootingmarks
% @everyheadingmarks
% @everyfootingmarks

\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
                          \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
                          \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
  \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
}

\everyheadingmarks bottom
\everyfootingmarks bottom

% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.


\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}

\def\HEADINGSoff{%
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
\HEADINGSoff

% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
% edge of all pages.
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}


% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
% page number on top right.
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}

% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
% It generates no output of its own.
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}


\message{tables,}
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).

% default indentation of table text
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in

% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
\newdimen\itemmax

% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
% these defs.
% They also define \itemindex
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).

\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}

\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}

\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}

\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
                 \itemzzz {#1}}

\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
                 \itemzzz {#1}}

\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
  \itemindex{#1}%
  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
  %

    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
    %
    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
    %
    % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
    % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
    % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
    % penalty 10001...)
    \penalty 10001
    \endgroup
    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse

  \fi
}

\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}

% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}

% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
\envdef\table{%
  \let\itemindex\gobble
  \tablecheck{table}%
}
\envdef\ftable{%
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
  \tablecheck{ftable}%
}
\envdef\vtable{%
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
  \tablecheck{vtable}%
}
\def\tablecheck#1{%
  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
    \endgroup
    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
  \else
    \let\next\tablex
  \fi
  \next
}
\def\tablex#1{%
  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
  \parsearg\tabley
}
\def\tabley#1{%
  {%
    \makevalueexpandable
    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
    \expandafter
  }\temp \endtablez
\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
\def\itemfont{#2}%
\itemmax=\tableindent %
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
\exdentamount=\tableindent
\parindent = 0pt
\parskip = \smallskipamount
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
\let\item = \internalBitem %
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
}
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
  \aboveenvbreak
  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
  \itemmax=\tableindent
  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
  \exdentamount=\tableindent
  \parindent = 0pt
  \parskip = \smallskipamount
  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
  \let\item = \internalBitem
  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
}
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
\let\Eftable\Etable
\let\Evtable\Etable
\let\Eitemize\Etable
\let\Eenumerate\Etable

% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize

\newcount \itemno

\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}

\def\itemizezzz #1{%
  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
}

\def\doitemize#1{%
  \aboveenvbreak
  \itemmax=\itemindent
  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin

  \parindent=0pt
  \parskip=\smallskipamount
  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
  %
  % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
  % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
  % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
  % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
  % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
  %
  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
  %
  \let\item=\itemizeitem
}

% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
%
\def\itemizeitem{%
  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
  {%
   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
   % that's the theory.
   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
   \noindent
   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
   %
   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
  \flushcr
}

% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
%

% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
% argument is the same as `1'.
%
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
  %
  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
  \def\thearg{#1}%
  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi

  }%
}

% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
%
\def\startenumeration#1{%
  \advance\itemno by -1
  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
}

% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg

\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}

% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.

\def\itemizeitem{%
\advance\itemno by 1
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
\flushcr}

% @multitable macros
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96

%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
%   @item ...
%   using the widest term desired in each column.
%
% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
% will parse correctly, i.e.,
%
%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
%      template}
% Not:
%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
%      {Column 3 template}

% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.

% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
% if they are.

% Sample multitable:


\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
\newif\ifsetpercent

% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
%
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
  \global\advance\colcount by 1
  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
  \setuptable
}


  \go
}

% multitable-only commands.
%
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
% of an alignment entry.  \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
% undo it ourselves.
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
\def\headitem{%
  \checkenv\multitable
  \crcr
  \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
  \the\everytab % for the first item
}%
%
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%

% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
%
\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
%
\envdef\multitable{%
  \vskip\parskip
  \startsavinginserts
  %
  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
  \def\item{\crcr}%
  %
  \tolerance=9500
  \hbadness=9500
  \setmultitablespacing

  \parindent=\multitableparindent
  \overfullrule=0pt
  \global\colcount=0
  %
  \everycr = {%
    \noalign{%
      \global\everytab={}%
      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
      \checkinserts
      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
      %\filbreak
	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
    }%
  }%
  %
  \parsearg\domultitable
}
\def\domultitable#1{%
  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
  %
  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
  % The table preamble
  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
  \everycr{\noalign{%
  %
  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
  %
  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
  \halign\bgroup &%
    \global\advance\colcount by 1
    \multistrut
    \vtop{%
      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
      %
      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
      % the first one.
      %
      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
      % to the width of each template entry.
      %
      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
      %
      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
      \rightskip=0pt
      \ifnum\colcount=1
	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
      \else
	\ifsetpercent \else
	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
	\fi
       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
      \fi
      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
      % For example:
      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
      % @item @code{#}
      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
      % marking characters.
      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
    }\cr
}
\def\Emultitable{%
  \crcr
  \egroup % end the \halign
  \global\setpercentfalse
}

\def\setmultitablespacing{%
  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
  %
  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
  % to the width of each template entry.
  %
  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
  %
  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
  \rightskip=0pt
  \ifnum\colcount=1
    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
  \else
    \ifsetpercent \else
      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
    \fi
   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
  \fi
  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
  % For example:
  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
  % @item @code{#}
  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
  % characters.
  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
}

\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
% current baselineskip.
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
\fi
%% to keep lines equally spaced
\let\multistrut = \strut
\else
%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
width0pt\relax} \fi
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
%% table. If not, do nothing.
%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.

                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
\fi}

% In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
% finished.  Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
% main vertical list.  --kasal, 22jan03.
%
\newbox\savedfootnotes
%
% \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
% it instead of starting the insertion right away.
\def\startsavedfootnote{%
  \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
    \unvbox\savedfootnotes
}
\def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
  \crcr
  \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
    \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
  \fi
}

\message{conditionals,}

% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
% attempt to close an environment group.
%
\def\makecond#1{%
  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
}
\makecond{iftex}
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
\makecond{ifnothtml}
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
\makecond{ifnotxml}
  \let\subsec=\relax
  \let\subsection=\relax
  \let\subsubsec=\relax
  \let\subsubsection=\relax
  \let\titlepage=\relax
  \let\top=\relax
  \let\unnumbered=\relax
  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
}

% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
%
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}

\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}

% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
\let\dircategory = \comment

% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
%
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
\newcount\doignorecount

\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
  \obeylines
  \catcode`\@ = \other
  \catcode`\{ = \other
  \catcode`\} = \other
  %
  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
  \spaceisspace
  %
  % Ignore braces, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
  \catcode`\{ = 9
  \catcode`\} = 9
  %
  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
  \doignorecount = 0
  %
  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
  \dodoignore{#1}%
}

{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
  \obeylines %
  %
  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
    %
    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
    %
    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
    %
    % And now expand that command.
    \obeylines %
    \doignoretext ^^M%
  }%
}

    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
  \fi
  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
}

% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
%
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
    \let\next\enddoignore

}

% Finish off ignored text.
{ \obeylines%
  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
  % would result in a blank line in the output.
  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
}


% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.

% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
% didn't need it.
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
%
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
  \parsearg\setxxx}
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
  {%
    \makevalueexpandable
    \def\temp{#2}%
    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
    \ifx\temp\empty
      \next{}%
    \else
      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
    \fi
  }%
}
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}

% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
%
\parseargdef\clear{%
  {%
    \makevalueexpandable
    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
  }%
}

% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
{
  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
  %
  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
    \let\value = \expandablevalue
    % We don't want these characters active, ...
  \gdef\value{\begingroup
    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
  }
}
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}

% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
% sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
% complete).
%
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax

% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
% with @set.
%
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
%
\makecond{ifset}
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
\def\doifset#1#2{%
  {%
    \makevalueexpandable
    \let\next=\empty
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
    \fi
    \expandafter
  }\next
}
\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
\defineunmatchedend{ifset}

% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
%
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
%
\makecond{ifclear}
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
  \fi
  \next
}
\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}

% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
\let\dircategory=\comment
%
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}

% True conditional.  Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
% just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
% the outer level).
%
\def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
}

% @defininfoenclose.
\let\definfoenclose=\comment

% Index generation facilities

% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}

% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that

\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
  % closing the target index.
  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
    \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
  \fi
  % redefine \fooindfile:
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname

% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
%
\def\indexdummies{%
  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
  %
  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
  \let\{ = \mylbrace
  \let\} = \myrbrace
  %
  % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
  % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
  % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
  % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
  % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
  % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
  % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
  % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
  % is still getting written without apparent harm.
  %
  % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
  % help-texinfo, 22may06):
  % @macro funindex {WORD}
  % @findex xyz
  % @end macro
  % ...
  % @funindex commtest
  %
  % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
  % space.
  %
  % Sample whatsit resulting:
  % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
  %
  % So:
  \let\endinput = \empty
  }%
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
  }%
  %
  % Do the redefinitions.
  \commondummies
}

% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
% this will be simpler.
%
\def\atdummies{%
  \def\@{@@}%

  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
  %
  % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
  \def\definedummyword##1{%
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
  }%
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
  }%
  %
  % Do the redefinitions.
  \commondummies
  \otherbackslash
}

% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
%
\def\commondummies{%
  %
  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control% words,
  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
  % from whatever follows.
  %
  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
  % space.
  %
  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
  %
  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
  %
  \commondummiesnofonts
  %
  \definedummyletter\_%
  %
  % Non-English letters.
  \definedummyword\AA
  \definedummyword\AE
  \definedummyword\DH
  \definedummyword\L
  \definedummyword\O
  \definedummyword\OE
  \definedummyword\TH
  \definedummyword\aa
  \definedummyword\ae
  \definedummyword\dh
  \definedummyword\exclamdown
  \definedummyword\l
  \definedummyword\o
  \definedummyword\oe
  \definedummyword\ordf
  \definedummyword\ordm
  \definedummyword\questiondown
  \definedummyword\ss
  \definedummyword\th
  %
  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
  \definedummyword\bf
  \definedummyword\gtr
  \definedummyword\hat
  \definedummyword\less
  \definedummyword\sf
  \definedummyword\sl
  \definedummyword\tclose
  \definedummyword\tt
  %
  \definedummyword\LaTeX
  \definedummyword\TeX
  \definedummyword{i}%
  \definedummyword{r}%
  \definedummyword{sc}%
  \definedummyword{t}%
  %
  \definedummyword{TeX}%
  \definedummyword{acronym}%
  \definedummyword{cite}%
  \definedummyword{code}%
  \definedummyword{command}%
  \definedummyword{dfn}%
  \definedummyword{dots}%
  \definedummyword{emph}%
  \definedummyword{env}%
  \definedummyword{file}%
  \definedummyword{kbd}%
  \definedummyword{key}%
  \definedummyword{math}%
  \definedummyword{option}%
  \definedummyword{samp}%
  \definedummyword{strong}%
  \definedummyword{uref}%
  \definedummyword{url}%
  \definedummyword{var}%
  \definedummyword{verb}%
  \definedummyword{w}%
  %
  % Assorted special characters.
  \definedummyword\bullet
  \definedummyword\comma
  \definedummyword\copyright
  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
  \definedummyword\dots
  \definedummyword\enddots
  \definedummyword\equiv
  \definedummyword\error
  \definedummyword\euro
  \definedummyword\guillemetleft
  \definedummyword\guillemetright
  \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
  \definedummyword\guilsinglright
  \definedummyword\expansion
  \definedummyword\minus
  \definedummyword\ogonek
  \definedummyword\pounds
  \definedummyword\point
  \definedummyword\print
  \definedummyword\quotedblbase
  \definedummyword\quotedblleft
  \definedummyword\quotedblright
  \definedummyword\quoteleft
  \definedummyword\quoteright
  \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
  \definedummyword\result
  \definedummyword\textdegree
  %
  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
  \macrolist
  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
  \let\value = \expandablevalue
  %
  \normalturnoffactive
  \unsepspaces
  %
  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
  \makevalueexpandable
}

% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
%
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
  % Control letters and accents.
  \definedummyletter\!%
  \definedummyaccent\"%
  \definedummyaccent\'%
  \definedummyletter\*%
  \definedummyaccent\,%
  \definedummyletter\.%
  \definedummyletter\/%
  \definedummyletter\:%
  \definedummyaccent\=%
  \definedummyletter\?%
  \definedummyaccent\^%
  \definedummyaccent\`%
  \definedummyaccent\~%
  \definedummyword\u
  \definedummyword\v
  \definedummyword\H
  \definedummyword\dotaccent
  \definedummyword\ogonek
  \definedummyword\ringaccent
  \definedummyword\tieaccent
  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
  \definedummyword\udotaccent
  \definedummyword\dotless
  %
  % Texinfo font commands.
  \definedummyword\b
  \definedummyword\i
  \definedummyword\r
  \definedummyword\sc
  \definedummyword\t
  %
  % Commands that take arguments.
  \definedummyword\acronym
  \definedummyword\cite
  \definedummyword\code
  \definedummyword\command
  \definedummyword\dfn
  \definedummyword\emph
  \definedummyword\env
  \definedummyword\file
  \definedummyword\kbd
  \definedummyword\key
  \definedummyword\math
  \definedummyword\option
  \definedummyword\pxref
  \definedummyword\ref
  \definedummyword\samp
  \definedummyword\strong
  \definedummyword\tie
  \definedummyword\uref
  \definedummyword\url
  \definedummyword\var
  \definedummyword\verb
  \definedummyword\w
  \definedummyword\xref
}

% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
%
\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
\def\indexdummydots{...}
%
\def\indexnofonts{%
  % Accent commands should become @asis.
  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
  % We can just ignore other control letters.
  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
  %
  \commondummiesnofonts
  %
  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
  %\let\tt=\asis
  %
  \def\ { }%
  \def\@{@}%
  % how to handle braces?
  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
  %
  % Non-English letters.
  \let\"=\asis
  \let\`=\asis
  \let\'=\asis
  \let\^=\asis
  \let\~=\asis
  \let\==\asis
  \let\u=\asis
  \let\v=\asis
  \let\H=\asis
  \let\dotaccent=\asis
  \let\ringaccent=\asis
  \let\tieaccent=\asis
  \let\ubaraccent=\asis
  \let\udotaccent=\asis
  \let\dotless=\asis
  %
  % Other non-English letters.
  \def\AA{AA}%
  \def\AE{AE}%
  \def\DH{DZZ}%
  \def\L{L}%
  \def\OE{OE}%
  \def\O{O}%
  \def\TH{ZZZ}%
  \def\aa{aa}%
  \def\ae{ae}%
  \def\dh{dzz}%
  \def\exclamdown{!}%
  \def\l{l}%
  \def\oe{oe}%
  \def\ordf{a}%
  \def\ordm{o}%
  \def\o{o}%
  \def\ss{ss}%
  \def\exclamdown{!}%
  \def\questiondown{?}%
  \def\ss{ss}%
  \def\th{zzz}%
  %
  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
  \def\TeX{TeX}%
  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
  %\let\tt=\asis
  %
  % Assorted special characters.
  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
  \def\bullet{bullet}%
  \def\comma{,}%
  \def\copyright{copyright}%
  \def\dots{...}%
  \def\enddots{...}%
  \def\equiv{==}%
  \def\error{error}%
  \def\euro{euro}%
  \def\expansion{==>}%
  \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
  \def\guillemetright{>>}%
  \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
  \def\guilsinglright{>}%
  \def\minus{-}%
  \def\point{.}%
  \def\pounds{pounds}%
  \def\print{-|}%
  \def\quotedblbase{"}%
  \def\quotedblleft{"}%
  \def\quotedblright{"}%
  \def\quoteleft{`}%
  \def\quoteright{'}%
  \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
  \def\result{=>}%
  \def\textdegree{o}%
  %
  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
  % that starts with \.
  %
  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
  %
  \macrolist
}

\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?

% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}

% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
%
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
  \iflinks
  {%
    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
    \toks0 = {#2}%
    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%

    %
    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
    %
    \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
      \dosubindsanitize
    \else
      \dosubindwrite
    \fi
  }%
  \fi
}

% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
%
\def\dosubindwrite{%
  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.

  %
  % Remember, we are within a group.
  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
  \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
  %
  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to

  \temp
}

% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
%
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
% sequences like this:
% @end defun
% @tindex whatever
% @defun ...

%
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
%
% But wait, there is a catch there:
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
% representation of the skip.
%
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
%
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
%
\newskip\whatsitskip
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
%
% ..., ready, GO:
%
\def\safewhatsit#1{%
\ifhmode
  #1%
\else
  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
  \whatsitskip = \lastskip
  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
  \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
  %
  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
  % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
  \else
    \vskip-\whatsitskip
  \fi
  %
  #1%
  %
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
    %
    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
    %   @vindex index-whatever
    %   Description.
    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
    % and the "Description." paragraph.
    \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
  \else
    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
    \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
  \fi
\fi
}

% The index entry written in the file actually looks like

% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
%
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
  %
  \smallfonts \rm
  \tolerance = 9500
  \plainfrenchspacing
  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
  \indexbreaks
  %
  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains

      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
      % to make right now.
      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
      \catcode`\\ = 0
      \escapechar = `\\
      \begindoublecolumns

  \removelastskip
  %
  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
  \nobreak
  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
  \penalty 0
  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
  %
  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column

  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
  %
  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
  \nobreak
  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
}}

% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
%
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
%	\def\entry#1#2{...
% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
%
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
\def\entry{%
  \begingroup
    %
    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
    % affect previous text.
    \par
    %
    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
    \parfillskip = 0in
    %
    % No extra space above this paragraph.
    \parskip = 0in
    %
    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
    %
    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
    %
    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
    \hangindent = 2em
    %
    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
    % with blank space.
    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
    %
    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
    % columns.
    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
    %
    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
    \afterassignment\doentry
    \let\temp =
}
\def\doentry{%
    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
      \noindent
      \aftergroup\finishentry
      % And now comes the text of the entry.
}
\def\finishentry#1{%
    % #1 is the page number.
    %
    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
    \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
    \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
      \ %
    \else
      %
      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
      \hfil\penalty50
      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
      %
      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
      % \hbox ensues.
      \ifpdf
	\pdfgettoks#1.%
	\ \the\toksA
      \else
	\ #1%
      \fi
    \fi
    \par
  \endgroup
}

% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}

\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}


%
% All done with double columns.
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
  % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
  % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
  % following situation:
  %
  % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
  % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
  % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
  % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
  % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
  % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
  % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
  % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
  % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
  % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
  % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
  % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
  % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
  % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
  % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
  % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
  % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
  % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
  % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
  %
  % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
  % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
  \penalty0
  %
  \output = {%
    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
    % current page, no automatic page break.

% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
%
\def\appendixletter{%
  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%

  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}

% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
% and name of the chapter.  Page headings and footings can use
% these.  @section does likewise.
\def\thischapter{}
\def\thischapternum{}
\def\thischaptername{}
\def\thissection{}
\def\thissectionnum{}
\def\thissectionname{}

\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count

\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name

% we only have subsub.
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
%
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
%
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
\def\chapheadtype{N}

% Choose a heading macro
% #1 is heading type
% #2 is heading level
% #3 is text for heading
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
  \absseclevel=#2
  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
    \absseclevel = 0
  \else
    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
      \absseclevel = 3
    \fi
  \fi
  % The heading type:
  \def\headtype{#1}%
  \if \headtype U%
    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
    \fi
      \appendixzzz{#2}%
  \or \appendixsectionzzz{#2}%
  \or \appendixsubseczzz{#2}%
  \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}%
  \else
    % Check for appendix sections:
    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
    \else
      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
      \fi\fi
    \fi
    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
      \def\headtype{U}%
    \else
      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
    \fi
  \fi
  % Now print the heading:
  \if \headtype U%
    \ifcase\absseclevel
	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
    \fi
  \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}%
  \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}%
  \else
    \if \headtype A%
      \ifcase\absseclevel
	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
      \fi
    \else
      \ifcase\absseclevel
	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
      \or \seczzz{#3}%
      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
}

% an interface:
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}

% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
%
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
%
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
\def\chapteryyy#1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
  % as an @include file.
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
    \global\advance\chapno by 1
  %
  % Used for \float.
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
  \resetallfloatnos
  %
  % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
  \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
  %
  % Write the actual heading.
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%

  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
}

\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
%
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
  \resetallfloatnos
  %
  % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
  \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
  %
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
  %
  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
}

\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
\def\centerchapyyy#1{{\unnumberedyyy{#1}}}

% @top is like @unnumbered.
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}

\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
\def\unnumberedyyy#1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
  %
  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
  \resetallfloatnos
  %
  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX

  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
  % the toc entries.)
  \toks0 = {#1}%
  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
  %
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
  %

  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
}

% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
  \unnmhead0{#1}%
  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
}

% @top is like @unnumbered.
\let\top\unnumbered

% Sections.
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
\def\secyyy#1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
\def\seczzz#1{%
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
}

\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
\def\appendixsecyyy#1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
}
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection

\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
\def\unnumberedsecyyy#1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
}

% Subsections.
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
\def\numberedsubsecyyy#1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}

\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
\def\appendixsubsecyyy#1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}

\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy#1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}

% Subsubsections.
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy#1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}

\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy#1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}

\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy#1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}

% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
% Actually, they are now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}

\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}

\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}

% These macros control what the section commands do, according
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.

%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.


\def\majorheading{%
  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz

\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                    \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
                    \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
}

% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\def\subheading{\parsearg\dosubheading}
\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\dosubsubheading}
\def\doheading#1{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}

% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only

%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}

\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}

%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)



\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
\def\chapoddpage{%
  \chappager
  \ifodd\pageno \else
    \begingroup
      \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
      \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
      \hbox to 0pt{}%
      \chappager
    \endgroup
  \fi
}

\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}



\CHAPPAGon

% Chapter opening.
%
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}

% Normal chapter opening.
% 
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
%
% To test against our argument.
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
%
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
  % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
  \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
                        \gdef\thissection{}}%
  %
  \def\temptype{#2}%
  \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
                          \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
  \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
                          \gdef\thischapter{}}%
  \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
    \toks0={#1}%
    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
      % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
      % commands in some of the translations.
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
    }%
  \else
    \toks0={#1}%
    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
      % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
      % commands in some of the translations.
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
    }%
  \fi\fi\fi
  %
  % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
  % the preceding space.
  \safewhatsit\domark
  %
  % Insert the chapter heading break.
  \pchapsepmacro
  %
  % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
  % between here and the heading.
  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
  \domark
  %
  {%
    \chapfonts \rmisbold
    %
    % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
    \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
    %
    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
    \def\temptype{#2}%
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
      \def\thischapter{#1}%
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
      \def\toctype{omit}%
      \xdef\thischapter{}%
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
      \def\toctype{app}%
      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
      %
      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
    \else
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
      \def\toctype{numchap}%
      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
    \fi\fi\fi
    %
    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the

    \donoderef{#2}%
    %
    % Typeset the actual heading.
    \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
  }%


% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
\def\centerparameters{%
  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
  \leftskip = \rightskip
  \parfillskip = 0pt
}
  }%
  \chfplain{#1}{Ynothing}{}%
}}

\CHAPFplain % The default

% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
%
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
%
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                       \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
                       \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
}

\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
\par\penalty 5000 %
}

\def\centerchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                       \parindent=0pt
                       \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
}

\def\CHAPFopen{%
  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}


% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
%
\newskip\secheadingskip
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}




% Print any size, any type, section title.
%
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
% section number.
%
\def\seckeyword{sec}
%
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
  {%
    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
    %
    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
    \def\temptype{#3}%
    %
    % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
        \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
                              \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
      \fi
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
      % Don't redefine \thissection.
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
        \toks0={#1}%
        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
          % commands in some of the translations.
          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
        }%
      \fi
    \else
      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
        \toks0={#1}%
        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
          % commands in some of the translations.
          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
        }%
      \fi
    \fi\fi\fi
    %
    % Go into vertical mode.  Usually we'll already be there, but we
    % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
    % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
    \par
    %
    % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
    % the preceding space.
    \safewhatsit\domark
    %
    % Insert space above the heading.
    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
    %
    % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
    % between here and the heading.
    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
    \domark
    %
    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
      \def\toctype{unn}%
      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
      % and don't redefine \lastsection.
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
      \def\toctype{omit}%
      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
      \def\toctype{app}%
      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
    \else
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
      \def\toctype{num}%
      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
    \fi\fi\fi
    %
    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
    %
    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
    \donoderef{#3}%
    %
    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
    \nobreak
    %
    % Output the actual section heading.
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
          \unhbox0 #1}%
  }%

  % discardable item.)
  \vskip-\parskip
  %
  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
  %
  %   @section sec-whatever
  %   @deffn def-whatever
  \penalty 10001
}



\newwrite\tocfile

% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
% Called from @chapter, etc.
%
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
% destination to jump to.
%
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the

    \fi
    %
    \iflinks
      {\atdummies
       \edef\temp{%
         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
       \temp
      }%
    \fi
  \fi
  %

  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
}


% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
%
\def\activecatcodes{%
  \catcode`\"=\active
  \catcode`\$=\active
  \catcode`\<=\active
  \catcode`\>=\active
  \catcode`\\=\active
  \catcode`\^=\active
  \catcode`\_=\active
  \catcode`\|=\active
  \catcode`\~=\active
}


% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
\def\readtocfile{%
  \setupdatafile
  \activecatcodes
  \input \tocreadfilename
}

\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
\newcount\savepageno
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1

% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
%
\def\startcontents#1{%
  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
  \contentsalignmacro
  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
  %
  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
  %
  \savepageno = \pageno
  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
    %
    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
      %
      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
      \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
}

% redefined for the two-volume lispref.  We always output on
% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
%
\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}

% Normal (long) toc.
%
\def\contents{%
  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
    \ifeof 1 \else
      \readtocfile
    \fi
    \vfill \eject
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
    \ifeof 1 \else
      \pdfmakeoutlines
    \fi
    \closein 1
  \endgroup
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
}

% And just the chapters.
\def\summarycontents{%
  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
    %
    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
    \secfonts
    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
    \rm
    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
    \ifeof 1 \else
      \readtocfile
    \fi
    \closein 1
    \vfill \eject
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
  \endgroup
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
}
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents


  % But use \hss just in case.
  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
  %
  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10


% Appendices, in the main contents.
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
%
\def\appendixbox#1{%
  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%

\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}

% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
% Same as \defaultparindent.
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt

% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
% page number.

  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
\endgroup}

% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
\let\tocentry = \entry
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
  % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
  \entry{#1}{#2}%
\endgroup}

% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}

\message{environments,}
% @foo ... @end foo.

% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
%
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
%
\def\point{$\star$}
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}

% The @error{} command.
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
%
\newbox\errorbox
%
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
%
\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
   \vbox{
      \hrule height\dimen2
      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
      \hrule height\dimen2}
    \hfil}
%
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}

% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.

\envdef\tex{%
  \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
  \catcode `\%=14
  \catcode `\+=\other
  \catcode `\"=\other
  \catcode `\==\other
  \catcode `\|=\other
  \catcode `\<=\other
  \catcode `\>=\other
  \catcode`\`=\other
  \catcode`\'=\other
  \escapechar=`\\
  %
  \let\b=\ptexb

  \let\/=\ptexslash
  \let\*=\ptexstar
  \let\t=\ptext
  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % outer
  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
  %
  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
  \def\@{@}%
}
% There is no need to define \Etex.

% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).

% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.

% have any width.
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}

% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
% should produce a line of output anyway.
%
{\obeyspaces %
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}

% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
% for use in \parsearg.
{\sepspaces%
\global\let\obeyedspace= }

% This space is always present above and below environments.
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt


% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
%
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
  % \sectionheading, q.v.
  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
    \endgraf

      \removelastskip
      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
      % or better ...
      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
      \vskip\envskipamount
    \fi
  \fi


\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak

% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
\let\nonarrowing=\relax

% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around

%
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip

\envdef\cartouche{%
  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
  \startsavinginserts
  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
  \cartouter=\hsize
  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
				% side, and for 6pt waste from
				% each corner char, and rule thickness
  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
  \vbox\bgroup
      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
      \carttop
      \hbox\bgroup
	  \hskip\lskip
	  \vrule\kern3pt
	  \vbox\bgroup
	      \kern3pt
	      \hsize=\cartinner
	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
	      \lineskip=\normlskip
	      \parskip=\normpskip
	      \vskip -\parskip
	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
}
\def\Ecartouche{%
              \ifhmode\par\fi
	      \kern3pt
	  \egroup
	  \kern3pt\vrule
	  \hskip\rskip
      \egroup
      \cartbot
  \egroup
  \checkinserts
}


% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
% inside a group.
\newdimen\nonfillparindent
\def\nonfillstart{%
  \aboveenvbreak
  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
  \parskip = 0pt
  % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
  % the normal \indent.
  \nonfillparindent=\parindent
  \parindent = 0pt
  \let\indent\nonfillindent
  %
  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
  % at next level down.
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
  \else
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
  \fi
  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
}

\begingroup
\obeyspaces
% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
% @indent.
\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
\ifx\temp %
\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
\else%
\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
\fi%
}%
\endgroup
\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}

% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
% This affects the following displayed environments:
%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
%
\def\smallword{small}
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
    % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
    % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
    % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
    % to change the fonts afterward.
    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
  \fi
}
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
  \else
    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
  \fi
}

% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
% Let's do it by one command:
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
  \smallexamplefonts
  \lisp
}
\let\smallexample = \smalllisp

% Define two synonyms:
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
}

% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
%
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
%
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
  \nonfillstart
  \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
  \gobble       % eat return
}
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
%
\makedispenv {display}{%
  \nonfillstart
  \gobble
  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
  \smallexamplefonts \rm
  \display
}

% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
%
\makedispenv{format}{%
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
  \nonfillstart
  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
  \gobble
}
%
% @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
%
\def\smallformat{\begingroup
  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
  \smallexamplefonts \rm
  \format
}

% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
\envdef\flushleft{%
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
  \nonfillstart
  \gobble
}
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak

% @flushright.
%
\envdef\flushright{%
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
  \nonfillstart
  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
  \gobble
}
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak


% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
% justification.  From plain.tex.
\envdef\raggedright{%
  \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
}
\let\Eraggedright\par

\envdef\raggedleft{%
  \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
                  % badness reporting.
}
\let\Eraggedleft\par

\envdef\raggedcenter{%
  \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
                  % badness reporting.
}
\let\Eraggedcenter\par


% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
%
\def\quotationstart{%
  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
  \parindent=0pt
  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
  %
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
  \else
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
  \fi
  \parsearg\quotationlabel
}

\envdef\quotation{%
  \setnormaldispenv
  \quotationstart
}

\envdef\smallquotation{%
  \setsmalldispenv
  \quotationstart
}
\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation

% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
% doing normal filling.
%
\def\Equotation{%
  \par
  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
    % indent a bit.
    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
  \fi
  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
}

% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
    {\bf #1: }%
  \fi
}



  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
  % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
  % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
  % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
  %\do\`\do\'%
}
%
% [Knuth] p. 380
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
%
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
\begingroup
  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
\endgroup
%
% Setup for the @verb command.
%

\def\setupverb{%
  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
  \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
  \tabeightspaces
  % Respect line breaks,
  % print special symbols as themselves, and

\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
%
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
%
\begingroup
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
  \gdef\tabexpand{%

    }%
  }
\endgroup

% start the verbatim environment.
\def\setupverbatim{%
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
  \nonfillstart
  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
  \tt
  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
  \catcode`\`=\active
  \tabexpand
  \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
  % Respect line breaks,
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
  % make each space count

%
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
\begingroup
  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
\endgroup
%

% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
%
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
%% \begingroup
%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
%% |endgroup
%
\begingroup
  \catcode`\ =\active

  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
  % line in the output.
  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
\endgroup
%
\envdef\verbatim{%
    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
  \begingroup
    \nonfillstart
    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
    \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
}
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak


% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
%
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
\def\verbatiminclude{%
  \begingroup
    \catcode`\\=\other
    \catcode`~=\other
    \catcode`^=\other
    \catcode`_=\other
    \catcode`|=\other
    \catcode`<=\other
    \catcode`>=\other
    \catcode`+=\other
    \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
}
\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
  \begingroup
    \nonfillstart
    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
    \begingroup\setupverbatim
}
%
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
  {%
    \makevalueexpandable
    \setupverbatim
    \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
    \input #1
    \afterenvbreak
  }%
  \nonfillfinish
  \endgroup
}

% @copying ... @end copying.
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
%
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the

% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
% possible is very desirable.
%
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
%
\def\insertcopying{%
  \begingroup
    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
    \scanexp\copyingtext
  \endgroup
  \catcode`\^^M = \active
  \docopying
}

% What we do to finish off the copying text.
%
\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}

% @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand,
% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
% must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
% definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
% generate a \par.
%
% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually
% do \par.
%
% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
% it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc
% manual for man page generation.)
%
% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
%
{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
  \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
  \def^^M{%
    \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
      \par %
    \else %
      \space \penalty 1 %
    \fi %
  }%
  %
  % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
  \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
  \let\comment = \c %
  %
  % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
  % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
  \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
  %
  \copyingtext %
\endgroup}%
}


\message{defuns,}
% @defun etc.

\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
\newcount\defunpenalty

% Start the processing of @deffn:
\def\startdefun{%
  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
    \medbreak
    \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
                        % following @def command, see below.
  \catcode`\&=\active
  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
}

% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )

{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)

% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack

\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
% This is used to turn on special parens
% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}

% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
  \global\advance\parencount by 1
}
%
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
%
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
%
\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
} % End of definition inside \activeparens
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
\let\ampnr = \&
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}

% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
{
  \catcode`& = \active
  \global\let& = \ampnr
}

% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
% #1 is the function name.
% #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
%
\def\defname#1#2{%
  % How we'll output the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
  % just below it.
  \ifempty{#2}%
    \def\defnametype{}%
  \else
    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
    % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
    %
    % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
    % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
    % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
    % @def command.
    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
    %
    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
    % But do insert the glue.
    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
  \fi
  %
  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
  \dimen2=\leftskip
  \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
  %
  % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
  \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
  \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0  % compute size for first line
  \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent  % size for continuations
  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
  %
  % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
  % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
  \noindent
  %
  {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
   % so that \rightline will obey them.
   \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
   \dimen3 = 0pt  % was -1.25pc
   \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
  }%
  %
  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
  {\df #1}\enskip        % output function name
  % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
}

% Common pieces to start any @def...
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
%
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
  \begingroup\inENV
  % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
  % which is there to keep the function description together with its
  % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
  % break somewhere.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
  % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
  % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
  % between a section heading and a defun.
  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
  %
  % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
  % But do insert the glue.
  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \medbreak
  \else \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
  \fi
  %
  % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
  % so that it will exit this group.
  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
  %
  \parindent=0in
  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
}

\def\dodefunx#1{%
  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
  \checkenv#1%
  % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
  % x headers in a row.  It's not a great place, though.
  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
  %
  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
  % It's not a great place, though.
  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
  %
  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
  \catcode\equalChar=\active
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
  \spacesplit#3%
}

% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
%
\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
  % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
  %   @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
  % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
  % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
}

% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
% #5 is the method's return type.
%
\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
  \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
}
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}

% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
%
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
  \begingroup
    % call \deffnheader:
    #1#2 \endheader
    % common ending:
    \interlinepenalty = 10000
    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
    \endgraf
    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
    \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
    \checkparencounts
  \endgroup
}

\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
    \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
}

% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
%
\def\makedefun#1{%
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
  \temp
  \spacesplit#3%
}

% @defopvar.
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
    \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
  \begingroup\obeylines
  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
}

\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
  \begingroup\obeylines
  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
}

% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
%
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
% won't strip off the braces.
%
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
  \envdef#1{%
    \startdefun
    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
  }%
  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
  \def#3%
}

%%% Untyped functions:
% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
%
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}

% @deffn category name args
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
% (which might be empty) the arguments.
%
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
}%

% @deffn category class name args
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
% and the second is passed as empty.
%
{\obeylines %
 \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
 \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
   \ifx\relax #3%
     #1{#2}{}%
   \else %
     #1{#2}{#3#4}%
   \fi}%
}

% \defopon {category on}class name args
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }

% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
%
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
  \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
  \penalty 10002  % signal to \parsebodycommon and \defxbodycommon.
}

%%% Typed functions:
%
\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
#1%
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
  \defargscommonending
}

\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
\boldbraxnoamp
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
  \defargscommonending
}

% @deftypefn category type name args
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}

% @deftypeop category class type name args
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}

% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }

% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
%
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}

%%% Typed variables:

\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}

% @deftypevr category type var args
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
}

% @deftypecv category class type var args
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}

% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }

% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
%
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
}

%%% Untyped variables:

\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}

% @defvr category var args
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}

% @defcv category class var args
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
\begingroup
\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
%               at least some C++ text from working
\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
}

% \defcvof {category of}class var args
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }

%%% Type:
% @deftp category name args
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
}

% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}

% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
% #2 is the return type, if any.
% #3 is the function name.
}

% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
%
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
%
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
  %
  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
  % just below it.
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
  %
  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
  % The continuations:
  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
  %
  % Put the type name to the right margin.
  \noindent
  \hbox to 0pt{%
    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
    \kern\leftskip
    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
  }%
  %
  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
  {%
    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
    \df \tt
    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
    #3% output function name
  }%
  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
  %
  \boldbrax
  % arguments will be output next, if any.
}

% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
%
\def\defunargs#1{%
  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
  % tt for the names.
  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
  %
  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
  \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
  #1%
  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
  \endgroup
}

% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
%
\def\deftypemethod{%
  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
%
\def\activeparens{%
  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
  \catcode`\&=\active
    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
  \endgroup
}

% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
\def\deftypeivar{%
  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
%
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
  \begingroup
    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
            {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
    \defvarargs{#3}%
  \endgroup
}

% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
{
  \activeparens
  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
  \global\let& = \&
    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
    \defunargs{#3}%
  \endgroup
}

  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
}

\newcount\parencount
\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}

% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
\newif\ifampseen
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
    \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
    \defvarargs{#3}%
  \endgroup
}

\def\parenfont{%
  \ifampseen
    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
    % otherwise use the default font.
    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
  \else
    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
    \sf
  \fi
}
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
  \ifampseen
    \ifnum\parencount=1
      #1%
    \fi
  \fi
  \defargscommonending
}
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}

\def\opnr{%
  \global\advance\parencount by 1
  {\parenfont(}%
  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}

% @defvar == @defvr Variable

\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}

\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
}
\def\clnr{%
  {\parenfont)}%
  \infirstlevel \sl
  \global\advance\parencount by -1
}

\newcount\brackcount
\def\lbrb{%
  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
  {\bf[}%
}
\def\rbrb{%
  {\bf]}%
  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
}

\def\checkparencounts{%
  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
}
% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
\def\badparencount{%
  \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
  \global\parencount=0
}
\def\badbrackcount{%
  \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
  \global\brackcount=0
}

% @deftypevar int foobar

\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}

% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
  \defargscommonending
\endgroup}
\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}

% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable

\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}

\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
  \defargscommonending
\endgroup}

% Now define @deftp
% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.

\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}

% @deftp Class window height width ...

\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}

\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}

% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
%
\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}


\message{macros,}
% @macro.

% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
  \newwrite\macscribble
  \def\scantokens#1{%
    \toks0={#1}%
    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
    \input \jobname.tmp
  }
   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
   \input \jobname.tmp
   \endgroup
}
\else
\def\scanmacro#1{%
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
\fi

\def\scanmacro#1{%
  \begingroup
    \newlinechar`\^^M
    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
    % ... and \example
    \spaceisspace
    %
    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
    %							--kasal, 29nov03
    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
  \endgroup
}

\def\scanexp#1{%
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
  \temp
}

\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?

% List of all defined macros in the form
%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
% if there is a need.
\def\macrolist{}

% Add the macro to \macrolist
\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
}

% Utility routines.
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
%
\def\cslet#1#2{%
  \expandafter\let
  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
  \csname#2\endcsname
}
\csname#2\endcsname}

% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).

% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.

% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
% them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
% confine the change to the current group.

% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.

\def\scanctxt{%
  \catcode`\"=\other
  \catcode`\+=\other
  \catcode`\<=\other
  \catcode`\>=\other
  \catcode`\@=\other
  \catcode`\^=\other
  \catcode`\_=\other
  \catcode`\|=\other
  \catcode`\~=\other
  \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
}

\def\scanargctxt{%
  \scanctxt
  \catcode`\\=\other
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
}

\def\macrobodyctxt{%
  \scanctxt
  \catcode`\{=\other
  \catcode`\}=\other
  \catcode`\@=\other
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
  \usembodybackslash
}

\def\macroargctxt{%
  \scanctxt
  \catcode`\\=\other
}
  \catcode`\|=\other
  \catcode`\<=\other
  \catcode`\>=\other
  \catcode`\+=\other
  \catcode`\@=\other
  \catcode`\\=\other}

% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N

     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
  \fi
  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
  \fi}

\parseargdef\unmacro{%
\def\dounmacro#1{%
  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
    \begingroup
      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
    \endgroup
  \else

% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
%
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
  \ifx #1\relax
    % remove this
  \else
    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
  \fi
}


% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
    \expandafter\parsearg
  \fi \macnamexxx}

% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
% expanded by \write.
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}


% @alias.
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
  {%
    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
  }%
  \next
}


\message{cross references,}

\newwrite\auxfile

\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.


  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}

% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
% @node foo , bar , ...
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
%
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
%
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}

\let\nwnode=\node
\let\lastnode=\empty

% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
%
\def\donoderef#1{%
  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
  \fi
}

%
\newcount\savesfregister
%
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}

% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
%                 or the anchor name.
% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
%                 empty for anchors.
% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
%
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
%
\def\setref#1#2{%
% and backslash work in node names.
%
\def\setref#1#2{{%
  \atdummies
  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
  %
  \iflinks
    {%
      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
      }%
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
    }%
  \fi
}

% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed

\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
  \unsepspaces
  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
    \else
      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
      \else
        \ifhavexrefs
          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
        \else
          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
        \fi%
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
  %
  % Make link in pdf output.
  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
  \ifpdf
    {\indexnofonts
     \turnoffactive
     % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
     \getfilename{#4}%
     %
     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
     %
     \leavevmode
     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
       goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
     \else
       goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}%
     \fi
    }%
    \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
  \fi
  %
  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
  {%
    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
    \indexnofonts
    \turnoffactive
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
  }%
  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
    \else
      \printedrefname
    \fi
    %
    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
    % "in MANUALNAME".
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
    \fi
  \else
    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
    %
    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
    \else
      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
      {\turnoffactive
       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
      }%
      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
      %
      % But we always want a comma and a space:
      ,\space
      %
      % output the `page 3'.
      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \endlink
\endgroup}

% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
% one that Bob is working on :).
%
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}

% Things referred to by \setref.
%
\def\dosetq#1#2{%
  \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
  \next
}

% \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
%   CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
\def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}

% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
%
\def\Ypagenumber{\noexpand\folio}
\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
\def\Ynothing{}
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
\def\Ynumbered{%

  \fi\fi\fi
}

% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
%
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
\else
  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
\fi

% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
%

    \indexnofonts
    \otherbackslash
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
      \csname XR#1\endcsname
  }%
  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
    % If not defined, say something at least.

  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
}

% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
%
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
  {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
   % implementation are changed to commands like @'e.  Don't let these
   % mess up the control sequence name.
    \indexnofonts
    \turnoffactive
    \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
  }%
  %
  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
  %
  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
    %
    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
    \else
      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
    \fi
    %
    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
    % for later use in \listoffloats.
    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
      {\safexrefname}}%
  \fi
}

% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
%
\def\tryauxfile{%
  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
  \ifeof 1 \else
    \readdatafile{aux}%
    \global\havexrefstrue
  \fi
  \closein 1
}

\def\setupdatafile{%
  \catcode`\^^@=\other
  \catcode`\^^A=\other
  \catcode`\^^B=\other

  \catcode`\%=\other
  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
  %
  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
  \catcode`\\=\other
  %
  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
  {%
    \count1=128
    \def\loop{%
      \catcode\count1=\other
      \advance\count1 by 1
      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
    }%
  }%
  %
  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
  % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
  \catcode`\\=\other
  %
  % @ is our escape character in .aux files.
  \catcode`\{=1
  \catcode`\}=2
  \catcode`\@=0
}

\def\readdatafile#1{%
\begingroup
  \setupdatafile
  \input\jobname.#1
  \fi
  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
\endgroup}


\message{insertions,}
% including footnotes.

\newcount \footnoteno


% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
\let\footnotestyle=\comment

\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote

{\catcode `\@=11
%
% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.

% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
%
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
%
% The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
\gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
%
% ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
%
\gdef\dofootnote{%
  \insert\footins\bgroup
  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
  % So reset some parameters.

}
}%end \catcode `\@=11

% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
% would be lost.
% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.

% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
% out prematurely.
%
\def\startsavinginserts{%
  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
    \let\insert\saveinsert
  \else
    \let\checkinserts\relax
  \fi
    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
    \llap{%
      %
      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
      %
      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
      \hskip 12pt
    }%
  }%
}

% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
%
\def\saveinsert#1{%
  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
  \afterassignment\next
  % swallow the left brace
  \let\temp =
}
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}

\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}

\def\placesaveins#1{%
  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
    {\box#1}%
}

% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
{
  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
}

% initialization:
\def\newsaveins #1{%
  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
  \next
}
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
    \checksaveins #1}%
}

% initialize:
\let\checkinserts\empty
\newsaveins\footins
\newsaveins\margin


% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.

% undone and the next image would fail.
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
\ifeof 1 \else
  \closein 1
  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
  \input epsf.tex
\fi
\closein 1
%
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf

  % If the image is by itself, center it.
  \ifvmode
    \imagevmodetrue
    \nobreak\medskip
    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
    % above and below.
    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
    \nobreak
    \line\bgroup\hss
  \fi
  %
  % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
  % environment such as @quotation is respected.  On the other hand, if
  % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
  \noindent
  %
  % Output the image.
  \ifpdf
    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%

    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
  \fi
  %
  \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi  % space after the standalone image
\endgroup}


% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
%
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}

% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}

% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
%
% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
% be referable.
%
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
%
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
% chapter-level command.
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
%
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
  \let\thiscaption=\empty
  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
  %
  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
  %
  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
  %
  \startsavinginserts
  %
  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
  \par
  %
  \vtop\bgroup
    \def\floattype{#1}%
    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
    %
    \ifx\floattype\empty
      \let\safefloattype=\empty
    \else
      {%
        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
        \indexnofonts
        \turnoffactive
        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
      }%
    \fi
    %
    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
      %
      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
      \global\advance\floatno by 1
      %
      {%
        % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
        % lists of floats.
        %
        \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
      }%
    \fi
    %
    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
    \vskip\parskip
    %
    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
}

% we have these possibilities:
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
% @float & no caption:
%
\def\Efloat{%
    \let\floatident = \empty
    %
    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
    %
    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
      \fi
      % the number.
      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
    \fi
    %
    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
    \let\captionline = \floatident
    %
    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
      \fi
      %
      % caption text.
      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
    \fi
    %
    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
      \vskip.5\parskip
      \captionline
      %
      % Space below caption.
      \vskip\parskip
    \fi
    %
    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
      {%
        \atdummies
        %
        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
	\scanexp{%
	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
	      \thiscaption
	    \else
	      \thisshortcaption
	    \fi
	  }%
	}%
        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
      }%
    \fi
  \egroup  % end of \vtop
  %
  % place the captured inserts
  %
  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
  % float. --kasal, 26may04
  %
  \checkinserts
}

% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
%
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
}

% @caption, @shortcaption
%
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}

% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
\def\getfloatno#1{%
  \ifx#1\relax
      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
      %
      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
  \fi
  \let\floatno#1%
}

% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
% first read the @float command.
%
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%

% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}

% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
%
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
%
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
%
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
  \def\temp{#1}%
  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
}

% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
%
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
  {%
    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
    \indexnofonts
    \turnoffactive
    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
  }%
  %
  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
    \ifhavexrefs
      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
    \fi
  \else
    \begingroup
      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
    \endgroup
  \fi
}

% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
%
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
% they won't appear in the aux file).
%
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
  % in pdf output.
  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
  %
  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
  \writeentry
}}


\message{localization,}
% and i18n.

% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
% early, just after @documentencoding.  Single argument is the language
% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
%
{
  \catcode`\_ = \active
  \globaldefs=1
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
  \let_=\normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filenames
  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
    % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
    \ifeof 1
      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
    \else
      \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
      \input txi-#1.tex
    \fi
    \closein 1
  \endgroup % end raw TeX
\endgroup}
%
% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
% try txi-de.tex.
%
\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
  \ifeof 1
    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
    \let\temp = \relax
  \else
    \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
    \input txi-#1.tex
  \fi
  \closein 1
  \endgroup
}
}% end of special _ catcode
%
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  Putting it in the current
directory should work if nowhere else does.}

% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
%
% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
%
% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
% available languages.  This means we can support hyphenation in
% Texinfo, at least to some extent.  (This still doesn't solve the
% accented characters problem.)
%
\catcode`@=11
\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
  % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
  \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
    \message{no patterns for #1}%
  \else
    \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
  \fi
  % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
  \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
  \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
}

% Helpers for encodings.
% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
%
\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
   \count255=128
   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
      \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
      \advance\count255 by 1
   \repeat
}

\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
   \count255=128
   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
      \catcode\count255=#1\relax
      \advance\count255 by 1
   \repeat
}

% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
% according to the specified encoding.
%
\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
  % Encoding being declared for the document.
  \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
  %
  % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
  % to compare them with \ifx.
  \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
  \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
  \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
  \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
  \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
  %
  \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
     \asciichardefs
  %
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
     \lattwochardefs
  %
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
     \latonechardefs
  %
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
     \latninechardefs
  %
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
     \utfeightchardefs
  %
  \else
    \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
  %
  \fi % utfeight
  \fi % latnine
  \fi % latone
  \fi % lattwo
  \fi % ascii
}

% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
% the default font encoding (OT1).
%
\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}

% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}

% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
% macros containing the character definitions.
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
%
% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
\def\latonechardefs{%
  \gdef^^a0{~}
  \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
  \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
  \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
  \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
  \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
  \gdef^^a7{\S}
  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
  \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
  \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
  \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
  \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
  \gdef^^ad{\-}
  \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
  \gdef^^af{\={}}
  %
  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
  \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
  \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
  \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
  \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
  \gdef^^b6{\P}
  %
  \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
  \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
  \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
  %
  \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
  \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
  \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
  \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
  \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
  %
  \gdef^^c0{\`A}
  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
  \gdef^^c3{\~A}
  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
  \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
  \gdef^^c6{\AE}
  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
  \gdef^^c8{\`E}
  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
  \gdef^^ca{\^E}
  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
  \gdef^^cc{\`I}
  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
  \gdef^^cf{\"I}
  %
  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
  \gdef^^d1{\~N}
  \gdef^^d2{\`O}
  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
  \gdef^^d5{\~O}
  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
  \gdef^^d8{\O}
  \gdef^^d9{\`U}
  \gdef^^da{\'U}
  \gdef^^db{\^U}
  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
  \gdef^^de{\TH}
  \gdef^^df{\ss}
  %
  \gdef^^e0{\`a}
  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
  \gdef^^e3{\~a}
  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
  \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
  \gdef^^e6{\ae}
  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
  \gdef^^e8{\`e}
  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
  \gdef^^ea{\^e}
  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
  \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
  \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
  %
  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
  \gdef^^f1{\~n}
  \gdef^^f2{\`o}
  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
  \gdef^^f5{\~o}
  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
  \gdef^^f8{\o}
  \gdef^^f9{\`u}
  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
  \gdef^^fb{\^u}
  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
  \gdef^^fe{\th}
  \gdef^^ff{\"y}
}

% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
\def\latninechardefs{%
  % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
  \latonechardefs
  %
  \gdef^^a4{\euro}
  \gdef^^a6{\v S}
  \gdef^^a8{\v s}
  \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
  \gdef^^b8{\v z}
  \gdef^^bc{\OE}
  \gdef^^bd{\oe}
  \gdef^^be{\"Y}
}

% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
\def\lattwochardefs{%
  \gdef^^a0{~}
  \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
  \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
  \gdef^^a3{\L}
  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
  \gdef^^a5{\v L}
  \gdef^^a6{\'S}
  \gdef^^a7{\S}
  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
  \gdef^^a9{\v S}
  \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
  \gdef^^ab{\v T}
  \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
  \gdef^^ad{\-}
  \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
  \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
  %
  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
  \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
  \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
  \gdef^^b3{\l}
  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
  \gdef^^b5{\v l}
  \gdef^^b6{\'s}
  \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
  \gdef^^b9{\v s}
  \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
  \gdef^^bb{\v t}
  \gdef^^bc{\'z}
  \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
  \gdef^^be{\v z}
  \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
  %
  \gdef^^c0{\'R}
  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
  \gdef^^c3{\u A}
  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
  \gdef^^c5{\'L}
  \gdef^^c6{\'C}
  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
  \gdef^^c8{\v C}
  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
  \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
  \gdef^^cc{\v E}
  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
  \gdef^^cf{\v D}
  %
  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
  \gdef^^d1{\'N}
  \gdef^^d2{\v N}
  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
  \gdef^^d5{\H O}
  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
  \gdef^^d8{\v R}
  \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
  \gdef^^da{\'U}
  \gdef^^db{\H U}
  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
  \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
  \gdef^^df{\ss}
  %
  \gdef^^e0{\'r}
  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
  \gdef^^e3{\u a}
  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
  \gdef^^e5{\'l}
  \gdef^^e6{\'c}
  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
  \gdef^^e8{\v c}
  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
  \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
  \gdef^^ec{\v e}
  \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
  \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
  \gdef^^ef{\v d}
  %
  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
  \gdef^^f1{\'n}
  \gdef^^f2{\v n}
  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
  \gdef^^f5{\H o}
  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
  \gdef^^f8{\v r}
  \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
  \gdef^^fb{\H u}
  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
  \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
  \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
}

% UTF-8 character definitions.
%
% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
% changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
%
\newcount\countUTFx
\newcount\countUTFy
\newcount\countUTFz

\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
%
\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
%
\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}

\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
  \ifx #1\relax
    \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
  \else
    \expandafter #1%
  \fi
}

\begingroup
  \catcode`\~13
  \catcode`\"12

  \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
    \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
    \uccode`\~\countUTFx
    \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
    \advance\countUTFx by 1
    \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
      \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
    \fi}

  \countUTFx = "C2
  \countUTFy = "E0
  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
  \UTFviiiLoop

  \countUTFx = "E0
  \countUTFy = "F0
  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
  \UTFviiiLoop

  \countUTFx = "F0
  \countUTFy = "F4
  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
  \UTFviiiLoop
\endgroup

\begingroup
  \catcode`\"=12
  \catcode`\<=12
  \catcode`\.=12
  \catcode`\,=12
  \catcode`\;=12
  \catcode`\!=12
  \catcode`\~=13

  \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
    \countUTFz = "#1\relax
    \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
    \begingroup
      \parseXMLCharref
      \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
      \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
      \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
       \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
    \endgroup}

  \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
    \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
      \errhelp = \EMsimple
      \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
      \parseUTFviiiA,%
      \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
      \parseUTFviiiA;%
      \parseUTFviiiA,%
      \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
    \else
      \parseUTFviiiA;%
      \parseUTFviiiA,%
      \parseUTFviiiA!%
      \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
    \fi\fi\fi
  }

  \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
    \countUTFx = \countUTFz
    \divide\countUTFz by 64
    \countUTFy = \countUTFz
    \multiply\countUTFz by 64
    \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
    \advance\countUTFx by 128
    \uccode `#1\countUTFx
    \countUTFz = \countUTFy}

  \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
    \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
    \uccode `#3\countUTFz
    \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
\endgroup

\def\utfeightchardefs{%
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}

  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
}% end of \utfeightchardefs


% US-ASCII character definitions.
\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
   \relax
}

% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
% document encoding.
%
\setnonasciicharscatcode \other


\message{formatting,}

\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt

\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt

% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
\hbadness = 2000

% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
\widowpenalty=10000
\clubpenalty=10000


  \fi
}

% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
%
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.

  \ifpdf
    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
    % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
    % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
    \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
    \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
  \fi
  %
  \setleading{\textleading}

  \textleading = 13.2pt
  %
  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
  \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
                    {11in}{8.5in}%
}}

% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
  \textleading = 12pt
  %
  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
                    {-.2in}{0in}%
                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
                    {9.25in}{7in}%
  %

  \defbodyindent = .5cm
}}

% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
  \textleading = 12pt
  %
  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
                    {0pt}{14pt}%
                    {9in}{6in}%
  %
  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
  \tolerance = 700
  \hfuzz = 1pt
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
  \defbodyindent = .4cm
}}

% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt

  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
  % @end tex
  \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
                    {297mm}{210mm}%

% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
%
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
  \globaldefs = 1

  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
  \setleading{\textleading}%
  %
  \dimen0 = #1\relax
  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
  %
  \dimen2 = \hsize


\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}

% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
\catcode`\^^? = 14

% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
\catcode`\"=\other
\catcode`\~=\other

\def\normalplus{+}
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix

% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
%
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print


\catcode`\_=\active
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
\let\realunder=_
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }


\catcode`\$=\active
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix

% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
{\catcode`\==\active
\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}

\catcode`+=\active
\catcode`\_=\active

% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}

% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
% parsing them.
\def\turnoffactive{%
  \normalturnoffactive
  \otherbackslash
}

\catcode`\@=0

% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
% as in \char`\\.
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
% catcode other.
{\catcode`\\=\active
 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
}

% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}

% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}

% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
% in fixed width font.
\catcode`\\=\active
@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
%  @let \ = @normalbackslash

% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
% catcode other.
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}

% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
% the literal character `\'.
%
@def@normalturnoffactive{%
  @let\=@normalbackslash
  @let"=@normaldoublequote
  @let\=@realbackslash
  @let~=@normaltilde
  @let^=@normalcaret
  @let_=@normalunderscore

  @let>=@normalgreater
  @let+=@normalplus
  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
  @markupsetuplqdefault
  @markupsetuprqdefault
  @unsepspaces
}

% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
% the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
% effect.)
%
@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}

% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
@otherifyactive

@global@let\ = @eatinput

% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
%
@gdef@fixbackslash{%

@catcode`@# = @other
@catcode`@% = @other

@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
@catcode`@'=@active
@catcode`@`=@active
@markupsetuplqdefault
@markupsetuprqdefault

@c Gnulib now utterly and painfully insists on no trailing whitespace.
@c So we have to nuke it.

@c Local variables:
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'nuke-trailing-whitespace)
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
@c End:

@c vim:sw=2:

@ignore
   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
@end ignore

Return to bug 228205